Owner`s manual | Chrysler 2004 Sebring Sedan Automobile User Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1
1
INTRODUCTION
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
10
INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
▫ Partial Zero Emission Vehicle (PZEV)
For 2.4L — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 7
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your manufacturer’s dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factorytrained technicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is
interested in your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used throughout this owner’s
manual:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on a stamped
plate on the left front corner on the body of the vehicle,
visible through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label
affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label as a
convenient record of your vehicle identification number
and optional equipment.
INTRODUCTION
Partial Zero Emission Vehicle (PZEV) for 2.4L — If
Equipped
NOTE: If the 8th digit of the vehicle identification
number (VIN) contains a 9J9 then your vehicle is
equipped with the Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle (PZEV)
package.
NOTE: There are specific instructions regarding when
to change the ignition cables and spark plugs with the
PZEV package. Please refer to the Maintenance Schedules section in your owner’s manual for specific maintenance instructions.
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Central Locking — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Door Ajar Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . .12
▫ Automatic (Rolling) Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Automatic Unlock On Exit — Only Available If
Automatic Door Locks Are Enabled . . . . . . . . .17
m Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
m Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ “Child Protection” Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
m Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
m Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .23
m Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
m Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . .24
m Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .32
m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .47
m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
11
Ignition Key Removal
2
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the
gearshift knob push button has returned to the out
position. Turn the key to the Lock position and remove
the key.
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place
the lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the key cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key
clockwise slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system may trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the OFF or RUN positions.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and is in the OFF, LOCK, or ACC position, sounds a
signal to remind you to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal the
vehicle will start and run for 2 seconds then shut off. The
system will allow the engine to be started and run (for 2
seconds) up to six times after which the starter motor will
be disabled and the engine will not crank.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
• Additional Sentry Keys or Mobil Speed Pass™ devices
held too close to the ignition key when starting the
vehicle may cause problems when attempting to start
the vehicle. These devices cannot damage the Sentry
Key System, but can cause a momentary problem
when attempting to start the engine. If a problem
occurs, remove the Sentry Key from the key ring and
restart the vehicle. Pagers, cell phones, walkmans, etc.,
have no effect on this system.
The Theft Alarm Light, located on the instrument cluster
to the right of the fuel gauge, will illuminate for about 3
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the On
position. If the vehicle electronics do not receive a valid
signal from the ignition key, the theft alarm light will
flash continuously to signal that the vehicle has been
13
immobilized. If the Theft Alarm Light remains On during
vehicle operation, it indicates a fault in the system
electronics.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the
ignition On for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15
seconds.
1. this device may not cause harmful interference
Turn the ignition Off and remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition On
within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime will sound
and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition Off and remove the second key.
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch
the ignition On within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds a
single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light will stop
flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this
process to program up to a total of 8 keys.
2. this device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The interior lights will come on when you open any door,
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry (if so
equipped) or central unlock (if so equipped). They will
remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed
then fade to off.
The lights also will turn off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Power Door Locks
There is a door lock switch on each front door trim panel
located to the front of the door handle. Press this switch
to lock or unlock the four doors.
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive and
when you park and leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
15
Power Door Lock Switch
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the
ignition switch, and the driver’s door is open, the doors
will not lock.
Central Locking — If Equipped
All vehicle doors are locked with the first turn of the key
to the LOCK position. The double activation feature
requires you to turn the key in the cylinder lock two
times within five seconds to UNLOCK all vehicle doors
at once.
Door Ajar Warning
If you move the vehicle and a door is not completely
closed, the word DOOR will replace the odometer display and a chime will sound once. The odometer display
will reappear once the door is closed.
Automatic (Rolling) Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically, as programmed from
the factory, if:
Door Lock Plunger
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure that the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle
until you pull up the lock plungers.
1. The transaxle is in gear,
2. All doors are closed,
3. Vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h),
4. The accelerator pedal is depressed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Automatic Door Locks can be disabled or re-enabled
by performing the following procedure:
17
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2
2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON/RUN
and back to OFF 4 times ending up in the OFF position.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
Automatic Unlock on Exit — Only Available if
Automatic Door Locks are Enabled
This feature will unlock all the doors when the driver’s
door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. This function is disabled as delivered from the
factory. Automatic Unlock on Exit can be enabled or
disabled by performing the following procedure:
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON/RUN
and back to OFF 4 times ending up in the OFF position.
3. Depress the power door lock switch to unlock the
doors.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
“Child Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors)
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the
“child-protection” door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and use a key to
move the control near the door latch UP to the “Engage”
position as shown on the door label. When the system on
a door is engaged, that door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle. This will occur even though the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), lower the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
open the trunk from distances up to 23 feet (7 meters)
using a transmitter. You don’t have to point the transmitter at the vehicle to activate the system.
19
1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the LOCK
button.
3. Release both buttons.
The headlights will flash twice to acknowledge the
unlock signal.
NOTE: The Lamp Flash can be enabled or disabled by
performing the following procedure:
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button once to unlock the
driver’s door. Press the button twice within 5 seconds to
unlock all doors. If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated Entry, the interior lights also come on and remain
on for about 30 seconds, when you unlock the doors.
1. Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter.
NOTE: The system may be programmed to unlock all
the doors upon the first press of the Unlock button. To
toggle between the first press unlock of the driver’s door
to unlock of all doors, perform the following procedure:
To lock the doors:
The horn will chirp and the headlamps will flash once to
acknowledge the lock signal.
2. Continue to hold the Lock button, wait at least 4 but
no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Trunk
button.
3. Release both buttons.
NOTE: The horn chirp can be enabled or disabled by
the following procedure:
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the Lock button, wait at least 4 but
no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Unlock
button.
3. Release both buttons.
To unlock the trunk:
Press and hold the Trunk button on the transmitter to
unlatch the trunk.
NOTE: The transmitter can be programmed to unlatch
the trunk immediately upon activation of the Trunk
button (without pressing and holding) by performing the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Trunk
button.
3. Release both buttons.
Panic Alarm
The panic mode unlocks the driver’s door, turns on the
interior lights, flashes the headlights, and sounds the
horn for about 3 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
To use the Panic Alarm:
Press and hold the Panic Button for at least 1 second to
activate the panic alarm. Press and hold the panic button
a second time or unlock the door with the key (if
equipped with central locking) to deactivate the alarm.
The alarm will also shut itself off after 3 minutes, or when
the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
To Program Additional Transmitters:
Up to 4 transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle.
To program a transmitter, perform the following procedure:
1. With the vehicle in Park, turn the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position.
2. Using a currently programmed transmitter, press the
Unlock button on the transmitter. Continue to hold the
Unlock button, wait at least 4 but no longer than 10
seconds, then press and hold the Panic button for at least
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
one second. Release both buttons simultaneously. You
will hear a chime to signal that you can proceed with
programming the new transmitter.
3. Press and release the Lock and Unlock buttons simultaneously, followed by a press and release of ANY button
on each new transmitter to be programmed as well as the
original transmitter. You will hear a chime when a
transmitter has been successfully programmed. You will
have 30 seconds to finish programming all new transmitters. A chime will sound when the 30 seconds is over or
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
General Information
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and
with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions:
21
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is from one to two years
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement batteries are CR2016.
1. Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar
object. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket
material during removal.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. Reassemble the transmitter case. Snap the halves
together and test transmitter operation.
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM
The system monitors the doors, trunk, and ignition for
unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
up to 18 minutes. For the first three minutes the horn will
sound and the headlights and interior lights will flash.
Then the horn will stop and if the source of the trigger is
still present, the lights will continue to flash for another
15 minutes.
NOTE: The engine will not start until you disarm the
system.
To set the alarm:
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch,
the key, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all
doors.
3. The light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly
for 15 seconds. This shows that the system is arming. If
the light comes on but does not flash, the system is still
armed, but there is a problem in the trunk circuit. After 15
seconds the light will continue to flash slowly. This
shows that the system is fully armed.
To disarm the system:
Unlock a front door using either the key or the Keyless
Entry Transmitter.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
alarm had been triggered. Check the vehicle for tampering.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual lock control.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
23
before the switch will operate. Vehicles with manual
transmissions must be at zero mph for the switch to work.
With the ignition ON, the word “deck” will be displayed
in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk
is open. The odometer display will reappear once the
trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed.
With the key in lock position or key out, the “deck” will
be displayed until the trunk is closed.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Use the key or the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to
open the trunk from outside the vehicle. From inside the
car the trunk lid can be released by depressing the Trunk
Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel. The transmission must be in Park
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
POWER WINDOWS
NOTE: As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by
pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the
trunk latching mechanism. See picture.
The window controls on the driver’s door operate all
windows.
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, pull the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows
open, open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, left and right window bags for the driver and
passengers seated next to a window. If you will be
carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your seat
belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
25
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision which includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
Lap/Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle
or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
27
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push the lever above the webbing
upward to release the anchorage, and then move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
2
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag control module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning
Light to turn off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
31
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right
window bags to protect the driver and passengers sitting
next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo
up high enough to block the location of the window
bag. The area where the window bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not have any accessory items
installed which will alter the roof, including adding
a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios
etc.
33
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection
for the driver and front passenger. Left and right window
airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy only in moderate
to severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,
the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the
seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags
to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
up in the rear seat. Infants in rear-facing child restraints
should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a
passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see section on “Child Restraint”) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats.
Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. See the section on “Child Restraint”.
2. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
3. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
4. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
5. If your vehicle has left and right window bags, do not
lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into
the space between you and the door.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has left and right window bags, they
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Airbag System Components
The front airbag system consists of the following:
• Airbag Control Module
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
How The Airbag System Work
• Driver Airbag
• The airbag control module determines if a frontal
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate. The control module receives the level of collision severity, determines the proper level of airbag to
be deployed. The frontal airbag inflators are designed
to provide three different rates of air bag inflation.
• Passenger Airbag
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
The window airbag system, on vehicles so equipped,
consists of the following:
• Airbag Control Module
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
• Left and Right Window Bags Above Side Windows
• Left and Right Side Impact Sensors
• Interconnection Wiring
• The airbag control module will not detect rollover or
rear collisions.
• The airbag control module also monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.
These include all of the items listed above except the
knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering
wheel and column. If the key is in the “off” position, in
the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are
not on and will not inflate.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The airbag control module also turns on the
AIRBAG light in the instrument panel for 6 to
8 seconds when the ignition is first turned on,
then turns the light off. If it detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the light either
momentarily or continuously.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
• When the airbag control module detects a collision
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. Three levels of airbag inflation rates are
possible. These rates are determined by the airbag
control module based on collision severity. The airbag
covers separate and fold out of the way as the airbags
inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in
about 60 milliseconds. This is only about half of the
time it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented
through a vent hole in the rear of the airbag. The
passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags
do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and
position you for the best interaction with the front
airbag.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the airbag
control module detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to
help restrain the driver and front passenger, and then to
immediately deflate.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and right
front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
37
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Side Airbag System
The airbag control module determines if a side collision is
severe enough to require the airbag to inflate. The control
module receives the level of collision severity from the
side impact sensors. The airbag control module will not
detect rollover or rear impacts.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The side impact SRS Airbags are designed to activate
only in certain side collisions. When the airbag control
module detects a collision requiring the window bags to
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the window bag. The inflating window bag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and inflates
(in about the same time it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to
children. The window bag is only about 3 1⁄2 inches (8 3⁄4
cm) thick when it is inflated.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready for your protection in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
WARNING!
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System section.)
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
NOTE:
For additional information refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
to
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System Section.)
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the
child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether
straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
in adjacent rear-seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints
using the vehicle’s seat belts.
43
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seat back and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a hinged plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then lift the tether anchorage cover directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach
the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route
the tether strap to provide the most direct path between
the anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint and, where possible, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between the two posts. If
not possible, lower the head restraint and route the tether
strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
NOTE: This vehicle may be equipped with rotating
tether caps for accessing the tether anchors. Follow the
appropriate instructions below to attach child restraint
tether strap.
45
Child restraint tether strap attachment
(Non-Rotating Tether Caps)
1. Lift the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Child restraint tether strap attachment (Rotating
Tether Caps)
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
47
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
The engine in your new vehicle does not require a long
break-in period.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The crankcase oil installed in the engine at the factory is
a high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with expected climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The
recommended viscosity and quality grades are in Section
7 of this manual.
Do not use non-detergent or straight mineral oils.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
break-in and not an indication of a problem.
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
must remain open, close all windows. Adjust the
heating or cooling system to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower
at high speed.
• To avoid drawing exhaust gases into the vehicle, close
the trunk while driving. However, if for some reason it
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Safety belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor
condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to
8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the bulb is not lit
during starting, have it replaced. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
49
Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
present, the cause should be corrected immediately.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
m Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Console Features — Without Heated Seats . . . .53
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Console Features — With Heated Seats . . . . . . .54
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror— If Equipped . . . . . .55
m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors— If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .56
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . . .62
▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . .64
52
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Headlight Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Using Speed Control On Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Programming The Universal Transceiver . . . . . .71
m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ “Rolling Code” Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . .74
▫ Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System . . . .66
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
m Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Reprogramming A Single Button . . . . . . . . . . .75
m Traction Control— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
m Electronic Speed Control— If Equipped . . . . . .68
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
m Electrical Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONSOLE FEATURES
Console Features — Without Heated Seats
53
The center console/armrest has a pencil /tire gage holder
and a tissue holder mounted on the underside of the
cover. The bottom of the console bin also has built in
holders for compact discs or cassette tapes. There are also
two cup holders for rear seat passengers located directly
in the back of the center console.
Two coin holders are located toward the front of the
inside of the console bin. The right side coin holder can
accommodate dimes, nickels or pennies, while the left
side coin holder can hold quarters, dimes, nickels, or
pennies. Both can also accommodate various combinations of different types of coins, including some international currencies. The slot on the far left side is not for
coins, but for an optional power outlet, if so equipped.
The front console has two cup holders in the front and a
storage bin. An optional removable ashtray may be
located in the driver’s side cup holder.
3
54
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Features — With Heated Seats
The front console has two cup holders. An optional
removable ashtray may be located in the driver’s side cup
holder.
The center console/armrest has a pencil /tire gage holder
and a tissue holder mounted on the underside of the
cover. The bottom of the console bin also has built in
holders for compact discs or cassette tapes. The power
outlet is also mounted inside the center console (if
equipped). There are also two cup holders for rear seat
passengers and a rear courtesy lamp located directly in
back of the center console.
Two coin holders are located toward the front of the
inside of the console bin. The right side coin holder can
accommodate dimes, nickels or pennies, while the left
side coin holder can hold quarters, dimes, nickels, or
pennies. Both can also accommodate various combinations of different types of coins, including some international currencies.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror— If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
55
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors— If Equipped
Both of the outside mirrors can be adjusted by using the
remote controls mounted on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
3
NOTE: Place the mirror selector switch in the center
(neutral) position to prevent accidental movement of the
mirrors.
56
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this
convex mirror.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
Forward/Rearward
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
57
Reclining Bucket Seats
The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position.
WARNING!
After releasing the adjusting bar, apply forward and
rearward body pressure to be sure the seat is latched.
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
3
58
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the front switch to move the seat
up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The rear
switch controls the seatback recliner.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats on
models equipped with leather seats. The controls for the
heated seats are located in the floor console next to the
parking brake.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
59
The left rotary switch controls the heat level for the
driver’s seat, and the right rotary switch controls the heat
level for the passenger’s seat. These switches feature
several heat settings ranging from 0 to 6.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture
to fold down either or both seatbacks.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraints so
that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise, pull
up on the head restraint. To lower, depress the button on
the post guide and push down on the head restraint.
When returning the rear seat back to the upright position
be sure the seat back is latched.
3
60
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
61
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
marked “prop” on the underside of the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Interior Lights
The map/courtesy lights come on when a door is opened
and the panel lamp dimmer switch (located on the turn
signal control stalk) is in any detent except fully counterclockwise (dome lamp ON position) or fully clockwise
(dome lamp OFF position). Rotating the panel dimmer
switch fully counter-clockwise will turn on the lights.
Turn the panel dimmer switch fully clockwise to prevent
the lights from coming on when a door is opened.
NOTE: The interior lights have a “fade to off” feature.
When the lights are turned off, they gradually “fade” off.
3
62
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control for the
interior lights on the Multi-Function
Control Lever upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel
lights.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn
on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom full-circle position. The
interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Daytime Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control to the first
detent (full-circle). This feature brightens the odometer and radio display
when the parking lights or headlights
are on during daylight conditions.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
These lights are mounted between the sun visors. Each
light has a push-on push-off switch.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure that they have been
turned off before leaving the vehicle.
The following two types of front map/reading lights may
be equipped on this vehicle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
63
Multi-Function Control Lever
3
The Multi-Function lever controls the operation of the
headlights, turn signals, headlight beam select switch,
instrument panel light dimming, courtesy lights, passing
lights, dome light and fog lights.
64
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the control lever to the first detent for
parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever
the ignition switch is turned on. The lights remain on
until the ignition switch is turned OFF or the parking
brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for
normal night time driving.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned off, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is in the multi-function lever.
To activate the fog lights, turn on the low beam
headlights and pull out the end of the control
lever. A light in the instrument cluster shows when the
fog lights are on.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
turn the center portion of the lever up or down. Turning
the dimmer control to the full up position also turns on
the courtesy lights. Turning the dimmer control to the full
down position prevents the courtesy lights from coming
on when a door is opened.
NOTE: The switch will turn on the fog lights only if the
low beam headlights are on. Turning on the high beam
headlights turns off the fog lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the turn signal lever up or down and the arrows in
the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of
the front and rear turn signal lights. You can signal a lane
change by moving the lever partially up or down.
Headlight Beam Select Switch
Pull the turn signal lever towards you to switch the
headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the turn signal lever a
second time to switch the headlights to LOW beam.
65
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
right side control lever. Turn the end of the control lever
to select the desired wiper speed.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the turn signal lever toward the steering
wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for about 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlighted area.
To activate the delay, turn off the ignition while the
headlights are still on. Then turn off the headlights. The
delay interval begins when the ignition is turned off.
NOTE: Always remove any build-up of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to
the OFF position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
66
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for several cycles, then turn OFF.
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Turn the lever to the delay
position, then select the delay interval. The delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 1/2 second.
WARNING!
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 16 km/h (10 mph),
delay times will be doubled.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly
in place.
Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and
release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
67
TRACTION CONTROL— IF EQUIPPED
To turn the Traction Control System Off, press
the switch located on the top of the steering
column, to the right of the hazard switch, until
the Traction Control indicator in the instrument
cluster lights up.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
To turn the Traction Control System On, press the switch
until the Traction Control indicator in the instrument
cluster turns off.
3
68
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Traction Control System is enabled each
time the ignition switch is turned On. This will occur
even if you used the switch to turn the system off before
powering down or turning the ignition to Lock.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL— IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device will control the throttle operation to maintain a constant vehicle speed between 30
mph (48 km/h) and 85 mph (137 km/h). The controls are
on the steering wheel.
To Activate:
Press the ON/OFF switch to turn the speed control
system ON. To turn the system OFF, press the ON/OFF
switch again. The system should be turned OFF when not
in use. The CRUISE Indicator in the instrument cluster
will light up when the Speed Control is ON.
NOTE: You must press the ON button to activate the
system each time the engine is started.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system ON
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed and the
system is ON, press and release the SET button. Release
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. The speed control is now Engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake or clutch pressure will deactivate
speed control without erasing the memory. Pushing the
ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition turns the
speed control system off and erases the memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME/ACCEL button. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting:
When the speed control is Engaged (actively controlling
to a SET speed), speed can be increased by pressing and
holding the RESUME/ACCEL button. When the button
is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the RESUME/ACCEL button once will result in
a 2 mph (3 km/h) increase in the SET speed. Each time
the button is tapped, the SET speed increases. For example tapping the button three times will increase speed
by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
69
To decrease speed while speed control is Engaged, press
and hold the COAST button. Releasing the button when
the desired speed is reached, will establish a new SET
speed.
Tapping the COAST button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in the SET speed. Each time the
button is tapped, the SET speed decreases. For example,
tapping the button three times will decrease speed by 3
mph (5 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing:
NOTE: If the set speed is exceeded by 20 mph (32
km/h) or more during the acceleration, the set speed will
have to manually re-engaged.
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the SET speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
Vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with
Interactive Speed Control. This feature operates when
travelling up or down hills with the Speed Control
engaged and the driver’s foot off of the accelerator.
3
70
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When Climbing A Hill
If vehicle speed drops 3 mph (5 km/h) below the Speed
Control set speed, the transaxle will downshift to third
gear. Under severe conditions the transaxle may downshift again to second gear. The transaxle will upshift to
fourth gear after the vehicle has reached the top of the
hill.
When Descending A Hill
If vehicle speed rises 3 mph (5 km/h) over the Speed
Control set speed, the transaxle will downshift to third
gear. This provides engine braking to keep vehicle speed
under control. The transaxle will not downshift below
third gear to control vehicle overspeed. The transaxle will
upshift to fourth gear after the vehicle has reached the
bottom of the hill.
NOTE: On very steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain
may occur. It may be preferable to drive without Speed
Control.
Rolling Hills
The transaxle may downshift into third gear and remain
there as the vehicle travels over rolling hills. The transaxle will upshift into fourth gear when the road flattens
out.
The transaxle will resume its normal shift schedule if you
depress the accelerator pedal during any of the above
conditions.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
For additional information on HomeLinkt, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
71
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
Programming The Universal Transceiver
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight
down.
1. Turn off the engine.
3
72
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three
inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its
indicator light in view.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
NOTE: Step 2 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand held transmitters.
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed.
NOTE: Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
73
5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver.
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
copying of your code.
NOTE:
If you do not successfully program the
Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand
held transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or
call toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515,
or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
• Press and hold the programmed button on the Universal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds,
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature.
“Rolling Code” Programming
NOTE: If your hand held transmitter appears to program the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or
other device does not operate, and your device was
manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or
other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”
system:
• Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention
of “Rolling Codes”.
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing the Programming
portion of this text:
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
3
74
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have
difficulty in locating the training button, check your
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on
the Internet, at www.homelink.com.
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
start step 3.
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
and release the button a second time to complete the
training process. Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
training.
Your garage door opener should now recognize your
Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may
now be programmed if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may
use either your Universal Transceiver or your original
hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand
held transmitter button every two seconds during programming
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver
button while you press and release the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and
then rapidly when the programming is successful.
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
the garage door or gate motor.
Operation
Press and hold the desired button on the Universal
Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins
to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal
is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also
be used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single Button
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to
three inches away from the button to be trained.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
75
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to
flash.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLinkt is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
3
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof controls are mounted between the sun
visors.
The following two types of power sunroof switches may
be equipped on this vehicle:
Press and release the Vent switch to open the sunroof to
the Vent position.
NOTE: Open the sunshade by hand when opening the
sunroof to the Vent position.
Press and release the Open switch to open the sunroof
and the sunshade. Press and release the front of the Open
switch to stop the sunroof at any position.
Press and hold the Close switch to close the sunroof.
Release the Close switch to stop sunroof travel at any
point.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The sunshade can only be closed by hand.
WARNING!
In an accident, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
77
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
The power outlet is located in the lower center of your
instrument panel. If your vehicle is equipped with heated
seats, a second power outlet is located inside the center
console. All accessories connected to any outlet should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use.
3
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
m Instrument Cluster Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
m Instrument Cluster Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
m Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
m Compass, Temperature, And Trip Computer
Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Compass Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
m Cigar Lighter/Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
m Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ To Set The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
m Sales Code RAZ—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player, CD Player And CD
Changer Controls — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
4
80
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ PTY (Program Type) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Operating Instructions — CD Player . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ AM/FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ EJT CD (Eject) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory . . . . . . .99
▫ FF/Tune/RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ To Change From Clock To Radio Mode . . . . . . .99
▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . .99
▫ Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Tape CD Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ CD Changer Control Capability — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
m Sales Code RBB—AM/FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player And CD Changer
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Electronic Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
81
▫ Radio Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
m Sales Code RBK—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player And CD Changer Controls . . . . . . . 110
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ CD Changer Control Capability — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Radio Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ To Set The Push-Button Memory . . . . . . . . . . 106
m 6 Disc CD Changer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Loading The CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Bass And Treble Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ AM/FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ FF/Tune/RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Cassette Player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Program Button 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ CD Changer Control Capability — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 116
4
82
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Program Button 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ CD Player — Single Disc In Radio . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ CD Player — 6 Disc CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Removing Discs From The CD Changer . . . . . 117
m Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . 119
▫ CD Changer Operation With The Changer
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
m Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
m Remote Sound System Controls — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 121
m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Manual Air Conditioning/Heater Control . . . . 121
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
83
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
4
84
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STANDARD
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
85
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM
4
86
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank.
2. Traction Control — If Equipped
This display indicator illuminates momentarily
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. The indicator will blink during an
active traction event, but will remain solid when the
system is deactivated or if a system malfunction occurs.
The Traction Control indicator will turn ON if:
• The Traction Control system is in use.
• The Traction Control switch has been used to turn
the system OFF.
• There is an Anti-Lock Brake system malfunction or
Traction Control system malfunction.
• The system has been deactivated to prevent damage
to the brake system due to overheated brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction
Control indicator. This is to prevent overheating of the
brake system and is a normal condition. The system will
remain disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have
cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn
off the Traction Control indicator.
3. Cruise Light — If Equipped
This light shows that the Speed Control System is ON.
This light will also illuminate for a 5–second bulb check
when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON
position.
4. Airbag Light
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the bulb does not
come on during starting, have the bulb replaced. If the
light stays on, or comes on while driving, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Tachometer
The red area of the scale shows the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear
range. Before reaching the red area (over 6,500 rpm), ease
up on the accelerator to prevent engine over speed.
6. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn
signal, when using the turn signal lever.
7. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or
low beam.
8. Speedometer
Shows the vehicle speed in miles-per-hour and
kilometers-per-hour.
9. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. The light should come on
briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
87
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
electrical devices, such as the Fog Lights or Rear
Defroster. If the Charging System Light remains on, it
means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with
the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local authorized dealer.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate as long as the key is in the ON
position, prior to engine start up. Approximately 15
seconds later the MIL may blink for 10 seconds then
resume to full illumination. (See “EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS” in
the “MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE” section of
your Owner Manual for more details). If the bulb does
not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON,
have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap or
poor fuel quality may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
4
88
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
through several of your typical driving cycles. In most
situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert to serious
conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or
severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
11. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the fog lights are ON.
12. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range (approximately mid point on the scale)
shows that the cooling system is operating properly.
The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal
temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go traffic, or when
towing a trailer.
If the pointer rises to the “H” mark, stop the vehicle and
turn off the engine until the problem is corrected.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this
heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to
maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and the Fan
control to High. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the cooling system.
13. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine coolant condition.
14. Transmission Range Indicator
This indicator illuminates to show the automatic transmission gear selection.
An optional AutoStick Gear Indicator displays the current
transaxle gear when in AutoStick mode.
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed, during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press and release
the Trip Odometer button. Press and release the Trip
button a second time to return to the odometer. While in
trip mode, press and hold the button for at least 1⁄2 second
to reset the trip odometer.
Door, Deck or Trunk Ajar Warnings
If you move the vehicle and a door is not completely
closed, the word DOOR will replace the odometer display and a chime will sound once. The odometer display
will reappear when the door is closed. If the trunk is not
completely closed, the work DECK will replace the
odometer display. The odometer display will reappear
when the trunk is closed.
89
16. Anti-Lock Warning Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
described elsewhere in this manual. This light
will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
RUN position and may stay on for several seconds. If
the light does not come on, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. The warning light should be
checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
17. Oil Pressure Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will
come on and remain on briefly when the ignition is turned on as a bulb check. If the bulb does not
come on during starting, have the bulb repaired
promptly.
4
90
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. Do not operate the
vehicle until the cause is corrected.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7.
18. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors both the brake fluid level
and the parking brake. If the light comes on,
it indicates either that the parking brake is
on or there is a low fluid level in the brake
master cylinder. On vehicles equipped with Anti-lock
brakes (ABS), the brake light may also indicate reduced braking performance.
If the parking brake is off and the light remains on, have
the brake system inspected as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
You could have an accident. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
RUN position. (Refer to “A Word About Your Keys,
Ignition Key Removal” in this manual for an illustration
of the ignition positions.) The light should come on. If the
light does not come on, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
The light will also come on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition in the RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In an ABS equipped vehicle, the Brake System Warning
light will come on if the ABS light is not functioning or if
the ABS system is not communicating.
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or
remain on continuously. Refer to 9Enhanced Driver
Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert™)9 in the Occupant Restraints section for more information.
20. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
The light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for
15 seconds. This shows that the system is arming. If the
light comes on but does not flash, the system is still
armed, but there is a problem in the trunk circuit. After 15
seconds the light will continue to flash slowly. This
shows that the system is fully armed.
91
21. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to about 2 1⁄2 gallons (9
1⁄2 liters), the fuel symbol will light and remain lit
until fuel is added.
COMPASS, TEMPERATURE, AND TRIP
COMPUTER DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
4
This feature allows you to choose between a compass /
temperature display and one of five trip conditions being
monitored.
92
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Buttons
Step Button
Use this button to choose or cycle through the five trip
conditions.
Reset
The following trip conditions can be reset:
• AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)
• ODO
• ET
To reset only the trip condition currently displayed, press
and release the STEP and US/M buttons simultaneously
until a chime sounds. To reset all trip conditions, hold
down the STEP and US/M buttons simultaneously
(about 2 seconds) until a second chime sounds and then
release the buttons.
NOTE: The screen must display one of the trip conditions above in order to reset either (or all) of these
conditions.
US / M Button
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
measurement units.
Trip Conditions
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
This display shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset.
Estimated Range (DTE)
This display shows the estimated distance that can be
traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is based on the most recent trip information: (Average Fuel Economy) x (Fuel Remaining)
This display cannot be reset.
Present Fuel Economy (ECO)
This display shows fuel economy for the last few seconds.
This display cannot be reset.
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset.
Compass Temperature Display
This display provides the outside temperature and one of
eight compass readings to indicate the direction the
vehicle is facing.
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.
Compass Calibration
The Automatic Compass Calibration feature eliminates
the need for the operator intervention under normal
conditions. If the CAL indicator is lit, the compass needs
to be calibrated. A good calibration requires a level
surface and an environment free of large metal objects
such as large buildings, bridges, underground cables,
railroad tracks, etc.
93
Automatic Compass Calibration
The self-calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions.
During a short initial period, the compass may appear
erratic and the CAL symbol will appear on the display.
After the vehicle has completed at least one complete
circle in an area free from large metal objects, calibration
will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished.
After initial calibration, the compass will continue to
automatically update this calibration whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Manual Compass Calibration
Compass calibration can also be requested. To manually
calibrate the compass, use the STEP button to step to the
compass/ temperature display and then hold down both
the STEP and US/M buttons simultaneously until the
CAL symbol is displayed. Release the buttons once the
CAL symbol appears. Manual compass calibration has
been initiated at this point. Drive the vehicle in circles in
an area free from large metal objects until the CAL
symbol is extinguished.
4
94
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the CAL indicator goes off, the compass is calibrated and should display correct headings. Verify
proper calibration by checking North (N), South (S), East
(E), and West (W). If the compass does not appear
accurate, repeat the calibration procedure in another area.
Compass Variance
Variance is the difference between magnetic North and
geographic North. For proper compass function, the
correct variance zone must be set.
Setting the Compass Variance
Refer to the variance map for the correct compass variance zone. To check the variance zone, the ignition must
be on and the compass / temperature displayed. Hold
down both the US / M and STEP buttons simultaneously
until the VAR symbol is lit and then immediately release
both buttons. The current variance zone will now be
displayed. To change the zone, press the STEP button
until the correct zone is displayed. Wait for about 5
seconds. The trip computer will store this variance in
memory and the compass will resume normal operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
95
Outside Temperature
If the outside temperature is more than 131°F (55°C), the
display will show 131°F. When the outside temperature is
less than 240°F (240°C), the display will show 240°F/C.
To Set The Clock:
CIGAR LIGHTER/ASHTRAY
For a nominal charge your dealer can provide a “smoker’s” package. This package consists of a cigar lighter and
an ashtray that utilizes one of the cup holders.
2. Press any other button to exit from the clock setting
mode. Or, it will exit the mode automatically if left alone
for 5 or 6 seconds.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout indicates the time in hours
and minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position. Whenever the radio is turned on, it first
comes up on either tape, cd or radio, whichever was
previously on, and will revert back to Time/Clock after a
few seconds. If Time/Clock was not previously selected,
the display will revert back to whichever was previously
on after a few seconds, whether it was tape, cd or radio.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, pressing
the Time button will cause the radio to display time for
several seconds, then turn off.
1. Use a ballpoint pen or similar object to press the hour
(H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio, The time setting
will increase each time you press the button.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
4
96
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
SALES CODE RAZ—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER
AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED
Operating Instructions — Radio
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
Power Switch, Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume. The
volume will be displayed and continuously updated
while the button is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seek Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the Seek button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Holding
the button will by pass stations until you release the
button.
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
PTY (Program Type) Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
97
4
98
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
at all RDS stations. Each RDS station will be played for a
5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the
last station. The PTY icon will then turn off.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the
balance and push the button back in. The balance will be
displayed and continuously updated while the button is
turned.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.
Adjust the balance and push the button back in. The fade
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
button is turned.
Tone Control
Slide the Bass and/or Treble controls up or down to
adjust the sound for the desired tone. The treble, and bass
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
slide is moved.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Scan Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5 seconds
at each listenable station before continuing to the next.
Pressing the AM/FM button continues the search in the
alternate frequency band.
To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
To Set The Radio Push-button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
99
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the pushbutton twice.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the Time button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
4
100
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Tape Eject
Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage
and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press the PTY button. The lighted arrow in
the display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization
and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press the
Dolby button (button 2) after you insert the tape. The NR
light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is
off. The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each
time a tape is inserted.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Operating Instructions — CD Player
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
101
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Inserting The Compact Disc
The CD player contained within the radio is not a
multi-disc changer, and will only accept one CD. Gently
insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing
up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch from
radio to CD mode and begin to play. The display will
show the track number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.
4
102
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. The ignition
switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a
disc with the radio OFF.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player and the display will show the time of day. If
you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will
show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Seek Button
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
EJT CD (Eject) Button
Press this button and the disc will unload and move to
the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the
radio mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the selected disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
103
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the tape player,
CD player, or satellite radio (if equipped).
Scan Button
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE
button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will
be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
current channel name and number will be displayed for
five seconds. The current program type and channel
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
current channel name and number will then be displayed
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Tape CD Button
Press this button to select between CD player and Tape
player.
Time Button
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Push-Button
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
4
104
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RBB—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CD
CHANGER CAPABILITY
105
Power Button
The volume control/power button pops out when
pressed, this turns the sound system ON in the mode last
used. Pushing the button back in turns the sound system
OFF.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
Operating Instructions
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
NOTE: When first learning the control functions, the
user should set the controls as shown in the following
list.
Tone Controls…As illustrated.
Speaker Control…Centered.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
4
106
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
make another selection. Holding the button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pushed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pushed.
To Set The Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the “1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be locked
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Balance
The balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust
the balance and push the button back in.
Fade
The fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
Bass and Treble Tone Control
The tone controls consist of 2 separate bands. The bass
band is on the left, and the treble band is on the right.
Each band is adjusted by a slider control with a detent at
the mid-position. Moving the control up or down increases or decreases amplification of that band. The mid
position provides a balanced output.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received in the FM mode.
Mode Button
Press the MODE button to select between the cassette
tape player, CD changer, or the Satellite Radio (if
equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is
selected “SA” will appear in your radio display.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite or radio mode.
Cassette Player Features
With ignition OFF and the sound system OFF, you can
eject the tape cassette by pushing the EJECT button.
107
Music Search
Pressing the SEEK button while playing a tape will start
the Music Search mode. Press the SEEK button up for the
next selection on the tape and down to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the tape is within
the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
The SEEK symbol appears on the display when Music
Search is in operation. Music Search shuts off automatically when a selection has been located.
Selective Music Search
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
You can turn the tape player ON by inserting a cassette or
activating the MODE button (with a cassette in the radio),
but only when the ignition and radio are on.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Pressing the TUNE button up or down momentarily
activates Fast Forward or Rewind and makes the directional arrows appear on the display.
Each time a cassette is inserted the tape player will begin
playing on the side of the cassette that is facing up in the
player.
To stop Fast Forward or Rewind, press the TUNE button
again.
4
108
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Time Button
Press the time button to toggle between station frequency
and time of day.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Pressing this button while playing a cassette tape will
change the side of the tape being played.
Push-Button
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
NR (Noise Reduction)
Pushing the Number 2 Pre-set button when a tape is
playing deactivates the Dolby Noise Reduction System*.
When Dolby is ON, the NR symbol appears on the
display. Each time a tape is inserted the Dolby will turn
ON.
* “Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
109
Radio Display Messages
Your radio has been designed to display certain messages
when a problem is detected with the CD player.
4
110
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER
CONTROLS
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust
the balance and push the button back in.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bass and Treble Tone Control
The tone controls consist of 2 separate bands. The bass
band is on the left, and the treble band is on the right.
Each band is adjusted by a slider control with a detent at
the mid-position. Moving the control up or down increases or decreases amplification of that band. The mid
position provides a balanced output.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5
seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
111
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset
button is used a corresponding button number will be
displayed.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
4
112
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
CD Player Operation
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
113
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on
the selected disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the
Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if
equipped) is selected “SA” will appear in your radio
display.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite mode.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Push-Button
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
4
114
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Display Messages
Your radio has been designed to display certain messages
when a problem is detected with the CD player.
115
6 DISC CD CHANGER — IF EQUIPPED
The CD changer is located below the radio in the
instrument panel. The changer plays only 4 3⁄4 inch (12
cm) discs. The changer holds up to 6 discs. Each disc is
loaded and ejected through a single slot in front of the
changer. Each disc has a numbered button with an amber
light above it which, when illuminated, indicates that a
disc is loaded in that particular chamber.
Loading the CD Changer
When inserting the first CD into the changer if the radio
is on, wait until the single slot is illuminated on both
sides and simply insert the first disc.
4
116
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To insert additional CDs into the changer, the instructions
follow:
1. Select and press any numbered button without an
illuminated light above it.
2. Insert the CD while the light above the chosen button
is flashing and the two lights on either side of the slot are
illuminated.
Seek Button
Press the top of this button on the radio once to play the
next track. Press the bottom of the button once to return
to the beginning of the current track. Press the bottom of
the button twice to play the previous track.
3. Upon insertion, the CD will begin to play, and both the
button light and the lights in the corner of the loading
slot will illuminate.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press the FF (fast forward) button and the CD player will
fast forward through the tracks until the button is released. Press the RW (rewind) button and the CD player
will reverse through the tracks until the button is released.
4. Repeat the process for loading any additional CDs.
The CD player will stop while additional CDs are loaded.
Mode Button
Press this button to toggle between radio and cd modes.
Playing Discs
The radio will show the CD number, the CD track
number, and the Track Time Elapsed while the radio is in
the CD mode. If more than one CD is loaded in the
changer, the changer will automatically play the next disc
after playing the last track of the current disc.
Program Button 1
Press this button to play the next available disc.
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
current compact disc in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace. The CD changer stays in the
random play mode when changing to the next disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
117
NOTE: The changer will not random play between
discs.
• Pressing the AM/FM button while in the tape or CD
mode will select the radio mode.
Press the top of the Seek button once to move to the next
randomly selected track. Press the bottom of the Seek
button to go back to the beginning of the track.
• If in the CD mode and the last CD is ejected, the radio
will tune to the last station selected.
Press button 4 a second time to stop random play.
Program Button 5
Press this button to play the previous disc.
Time Button
Press this button to switch between time of day and CD
track time.
Changing Modes
While in the radio mode, if a cassette is loaded, press the
Mode button to switch to the tape mode. If a CD is
loaded, press the Mode button to select the CD mode. If
neither a tape nor CD is loaded, the radio will ignore the
command.
• Inserting either a tape or CD automatically starts that
mode of play.
Removing Discs from the CD Changer
If there is a single CD in the changer, press the EJT button
and the CD will eject. If the CD is not removed within 15
seconds, it will automatically reload into the CD changer.
To eject additional CDs from the changer, first select the
numbered button where the CD is located and then press
the EJT button.
CD Changer Operation with the Changer Off
The CD changer is able to load and eject discs with the
ignition power off. However, while the ignition is off, one
of the six numbered buttons must be pressed first.
4
118
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/
CD, Etc.).
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset push-button.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
119
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
The button in the center of the left hand switch will cause
the CD changer to play the next available disc.
CD Player — Single Disc in Radio
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD Player — 6 Disc CD Changer
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
tightly secured to the cassette.
5. A loose tape should not be inserted into the radio.
4
120
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge or center; avoid touching
the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service. You may have a problem
with CD-R (recordable) and CD-RW (recordable and
writable) disks.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the cellular antenna, it is recommended that
the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular
phone operation.
121
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning/Heater Control
The Air Conditioning System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle.
4
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
122
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The controls are as follows:
Fan and Air Conditioning Control
Use this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The 0
Setting represents OFF and the 4 Setting is the greatest amount of air flow.
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning,
choose the direction of the air through
the outlets by selecting between the
Air Conditioning Recirculation, PanelAir Conditioning, or Bi-Level Air Conditioning modes on the Mode Control.
Air Conditioning modes are indicated
by the snowflake symbol shown above in illustration.
Adjust the Temperature and Fan Controls.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the air conditioning condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. The
air conditioning condenser is located in front of the
radiator. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the
radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing
air conditioning performance.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
• Recirculation — Air Conditioning
Recirculated interior air is cooled and sent
through the instrument panel vents. Upon
initial start up of the vehicle in very hot or
humid weather, open windows and put in
outside air modes to flush hot/humid air out. Then
turn on the Recirculation mode to cool the vehicle
interior rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be
used to temporarily block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust.
NOTE: Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and under mild, humid conditions cause windows to fog. Use of this mode for longer
than 15 minutes is not recommended.
123
• Panel — Air Conditioning
Outside air flows through the air conditioning system and then through the outlets
located in the instrument panel.
• Bi-Level — Air Conditioning
Outside air flows through the air conditioning system and then through the outlets
located in both the instrument panel and floor
outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct air flow.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the instrument panel
and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
4
124
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
lesser amount through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
• Mix
Rear Seat Outlets
These outlets are located under the front seats and direct
warm air to the rear seat passengers. Air is directed
through these outlets when you select either the Floor,
Bi-Level, or Mix modes.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and
side window demist outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat at the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Rear Window Defroster
The Rear Window Defroster button is located to
the right of the Mode Control. Press this button
once to turn on the Rear Window Defrost and a second
time to turn them off. A light above the button shows that
the defroster is on.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and
side window demist outlets. Use this mode
with maximum fan and temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 15
minutes of operation. Each later activation will allow 10
minutes of operation.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost modes even if the Air Conditioning
is not selected. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST modes. A small amount of air
is directed to the side window demisters in BI-LEVEL
mode as well. The air is directed at the area of the
windows through which you view the outside mirrors.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Windshield and Side Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly
removed by using the defrost position on the mode
control.
Your side windows may fog on the inside in mild
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows,
select the Panel-Air Conditioning mode on the
Mode Control. Point the panel outlets toward the side
windows.
NOTE: Do not use the recirculation mode as it will not
clear windows under these conditions.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a highquality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
protection against overheating. A 50 % concentration is
recommended.
125
Winter Operation
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only the low blower speeds for the first 10 minutes of
operation. During engine warm up in cold weather, use
the Defrost mode to direct any cold air away from vehicle
occupants. Use of the Recirculate-Air Conditioning Mode
during winter months is not recommended due to the
possibility of window fogging.
NOTE: See Operating Tips chart (for Manual A/C
Control) at the end of this section for suggested control
settings in different weather conditions.
4
126
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips (Manual A/C Control Only)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
127
Outside Air Intake
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below -20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
m Battery And Engine Block Heaters — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
m Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Four Speed Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
m Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
m Traction Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5
130
STARTING AND OPERATING
m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
m AutoStick — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ AutoStick General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 148
m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
m Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Warranty Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
m Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
m Flexible Fuel – (2.7L Engines With Automatic
Transmission Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 158
STARTING AND OPERATING
131
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5
132
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Automatic Transaxle
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the key to the “START’” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING
133
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Extreme Cold Weather (below -20°F or -29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater and
battery blanket heater package (available from your
dealer) is recommended.
5
134
STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” or “EXTREME COLD
WEATHER” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” or “EXTREME COLD WEATHER” procedure should be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up. At cooler ambient temperatures, the idle
speed for the 2.7L engine may increase during extended
idles for improved heater performance.
BATTERY AND ENGINE BLOCK HEATERS — If
EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord. The engine block
heater cord is found under the hood near the air cleaner
housing.
STARTING AND OPERATING
135
WARNING!
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt AC electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle you should shift
the transmission into Park, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the park brake. Once the key is
removed from the ignition the transmission shift
lever is locked in the Park position, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,
you should never leave children unattended inside a
vehicle. The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift
lever into the “Park” position:
• When shifting into Park, depress the button on
the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the
way forward until it stops.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the console
to ensure it is in the “P” position.
• When engaged in Park you will not be able to
move the shifter rearward without depressing the
shift lever button.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are
expected to last for several days.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Brake/Transmission Interlock
This interlock system prevents you from moving the gear
selector out of the Park position unless the brake pedal is
pressed. The system is active when the ignition switch is
in the RUN position.
5
136
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push-button
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the OFF or RUN positions.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system may trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
Reset Mode
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the
forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral
(N) will continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the
vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without
damaging the transaxle.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).
Turn the Key to LOCK then restart the engine.
Shift into D and resume driving.
137
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could recur.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.
Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic
Transaxle
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
NOTE: If the key is in the RUN position, you must
press the brake pedal to shift out of the “P” Park position.
“P” Park
Supplements parking by locking the transaxle. Engine
can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while vehicle is in motion.
Apply parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
5
138
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without
depressing the shift button after you have set it in P.
Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the Park position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
“D” Overdrive
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts
and best fuel economy.
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers), use the “3” range.
“3” Drive
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transaxle
will operate normally in first and second while in this
range.
A delayed shift from second to third will occur at speeds
of about 31 to 38 mph (50 to 60 km/h) and low levels of
accelerator pedal travel. An early down-shift from third
to second will occur at a speed of about 34 to 30 mph (54
to 48 km/h). This is done to provide second gear engine
braking at speeds less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
Use the “3” range when descending steep grades to
prevent brake system distress.
139
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the brake light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
“L” Low
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
shifts occur as early as possible.
5
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position.
140
STARTING AND OPERATING
To release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal and
pull up on the parking brake lever. Push the release
button and lower the lever fully.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the selector out of Park. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill
grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector.
Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system operating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop.
141
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The ABS gives increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate
signals for the ABS computer. However, the system will
compensate when the compact spare is in use.
During stops where ABS is activated, a vibration of the
brake pedal may be felt and associated system noises
may be heard.
WARNING!
Pumping of the brake pedal will diminish the effectiveness of Anti-lock brakes and may lead to an
accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when
you need to slow down or stop.
5
142
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
POWER STEERING
The power assisted steering system of your vehicle
provides mechanical steering capability in the event
power assist is lost.
If for some reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted,
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions you will observe a substantial increase in
steering effort.
STARTING AND OPERATING
TRACTION CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
143
The system is always in the “stand by” mode unless:
• The Traction Control switch has been used to turn the
system off;
• There is an Anti-Lock Brake or Traction System malfunction;
• The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to
the brake system due to overheated brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction
Control indicator located in the instrument cluster.
The Traction Control System reduces wheel
slip and maintains traction at the driving
(front) wheels. The system reduces wheel slip
by engaging the brake on the wheel that is
losing traction while spinning. The traction system operates at speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. After cooling, the system will automatically reactivate and turn off the Traction Control
Light.
5
144
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING
145
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
5
146
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
147
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
5
148
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: Some vehicles have a “Tire and Loading Information” placard located on the driver’s side “B” pillar.
This placard tells you important information about the,
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
STARTING AND OPERATING
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
149
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb. (1400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5
150
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392 Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
151
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
5
152
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less that the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
“B” PILLAR
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
153
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
5
154
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have a total
tread life of 3,000 miles (4 800 km). Be sure to follow
the warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING
155
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
156
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING
157
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
5
158
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
CAUTION!
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The suggested rotation method is the
“forward-cross” shown in the diagram.
159
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
5
160
STARTING AND OPERATING
Autostick Operation
The Autostick position is just below the Overdrive position and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”. When
you place the shift lever in the Autostick position, it can
be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the left
(-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear
display.
automatically; shifting between the four available gears.
When you wish to engage autostick, simply move the
autostick lever to the AUTOSTICK position. The transaxle will remain in the current gear until an upshift or
downshift is chosen.
Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out
of the Autostick mode.
Autostick General Information
• The transaxle will automatically upshift from first to
second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM.
• Downshifts from third to second gear above 66 mph
(106 km/h) and from second to first gear above 37
mph (60 km/h) will be ignored.
• You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transaxle will operate
• The transaxle will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• While in the Autostick mode, Speed Control will only
function in third or fourth gear. Downshifting out of
third gear turns off speed control.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem it will disable the
Autostick mode and the transaxle will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular
gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in
poorer performance.
161
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to
your dealer immediately. Engine damage resulting from
operating with a heavy spark knock may not be covered
by the new vehicle warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and stumble. If you experience these
problems, try another brand of regular gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning fuel referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve
air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
162
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with materials called oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and
ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the
country during the winter months to reduce carbon
monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
problems and may damage critical fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. While MTBE
is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have
the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT in Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at higher
levels than allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in both Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Sulfur in Gasoline
If you live in the Northeast United States, your vehicle
may have been designed to meet California low emission
standards with cleaner burning California reformulated
gasoline with low sulfur. If such fuels are not available in
states adopting California emission standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting Federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be adversely affected.
Gasoline sold outside of California is permitted to have
higher sulfur levels which may affect the performance of
the vehicle’s catalytic converter. This may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. The manufacturer recommends that you try a different brand of
unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related prior to returning your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
163
CAUTION!
If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing, immediate service is required. See the On Board Diagnostics paragraph in the Maintenance section of this
manual.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
5
164
STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the driver’s
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be
sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened.
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on if the
gas cap is not properly secured. Make sure that the gas
cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
NOTE: The fuel tank filler tube may have a restricting
door about 50 mm (2 inches) down from the opening. If
fuel is poured from a portable container, the container
should have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open
the restricting door.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp to turn on.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
165
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Rear Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 lbs. (52 kg)
Rated Vehicle Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . 865 lbs. ( 392 kg)
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the maintenance schedules manual. When your vehicle is used for
trailer towing, never exceed the gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) by the addition of:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
5
166
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle.
Warranty Requirements
The Manufacturer’s Passenger Vehicle Warranty will
apply to vehicles used to tow trailers for non-commercial
use. However the following conditions must be met:
• The maximum trailer load is 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
• The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed
20 square feet (1.86 square meters).
• If using a manual transaxle vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive
clutch slippage.
• The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
• The “D” range can be selected when towing. However,
if frquent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3”
range must be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend tranaxle life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up.
WARNING!
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic
brake lines can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
recommended for motoring safety.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more
than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule
“B” in section 8 of this manual for transaxle fluid
change intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before
towing. Fluid discoloration, or a burnt odor, shows the
need for a transmission fluid and filter change.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using
the Autostick modes, and slecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range
should be selected that allows for adequate performance.
For example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be
maintaned. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain the
desired speed.
NOTE: Extended driving at high RPM should be
avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in
vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving
at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
167
FLEXIBLE FUEL – (2.7L Engines with Automatic
Transmission Only)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
5
168
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that:
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 liters) when
refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F
(32°C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start up even if the above recommendations are
followed.
Selection of Engine Oil
For best performance and protection of your vehicle, use
only crankcase engine oils that meet the following requirements:
STARTING AND OPERATING
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). We
only recommend API Certified engine oils that meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler’s Material Standard MS-9214. Use Mopar
or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-9214.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
169
• Engine Oil Selection for Operating on E-85
If you operate the vehicle on E-85 fuel, either full or
part-time, use only Mopar Flexible Fuel 5W-30 engine
oil (P/N 4318086) or an equivalent that meets the
Manufacturer’s Standard MS-9214. Equivalent commercial Flexible Fuel engine oils may be labeled as
Flexible Fuel (FFV) or Alternate Fuel (AFV). These
engine oils may be satisfactory if they meet the Manufacturer’s Standard.
The 5W-30 engine oil installed at the factory meets the
manufacturer’s requirements for Flexible Fuel engine oil.
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in Flexible Fuel
engines.
CAUTION!
If Flexible Fuel engine oil is not used when using
E-85, engine wear may be increased significantly.
This may void your warranty.
5
170
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Engine Oil Selection for Operating on Gasoline
If you operate the vehicle on regular unleaded gasoline
ONLY, use Mopar oil or an equivalent that meets certified
API (American Petroleum Institute) Quality.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F to 32°F (-18°C to 0°C), you may experience
an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start,
and a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle
and may void the warranty.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Schedule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
m If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
m Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
m Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
m Jump-Starting The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ All Transaxles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6
172
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
The flasher switch is on top of the steering column,
just behind the steering wheel. Depress the switch
and both cluster indicators and all front and rear directional signals will flash. Depress the switch again to turn
Hazard Warning Flashers off.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle in Park
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
173
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
6
174
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Preparations for Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, and set the parking brake. Place the gear
selector in PARK.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher, park vehicle on
firm, level surface.
• Put gear shift in park (automatic transmission) or
reverse (manual transmission).
• Set parking brake and turn off engine.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Changing a Tire
The spare wheel, scissors jack, and lug wrench are
stowed under the spare tire cover in the rear cargo area.
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
175
1. Block wheel diagonally opposite flat tire.
2. Remove the spare tire, scissors jack and lug wrench
from stowage.
6
176
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Before raising the vehicle, use lug wrench to carefully
pry off wheel cover (if equipped with steel wheels) or
center cap (if equipped with aluminum wheels). Loosen,
but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal
edges and retention teeth.
4. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange. Use the lift area
closest to the flat tire
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove flat tire and
install spare tire.
CENTER CAP REMOVAL
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
177
6
178
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6. Remove lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount spare tire.
8. Tighten all lug nuts on mounting studs.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Fully tighten the lug nuts. Torque wheel lug nuts to
100 ft. lbs. (135 N·m).
11. Store the flat tire, jack and tools.
12. Wheel cover installation (if required). Do not attempt
to install a wheel cover on a compact spare. Align valve
notch in wheel cover with valve stem on wheel. Snap
cover into place.
NOTE: When reinstalling the center cap it is necessary
to align the center cap notch with the first spoke, just
right of the valve stem.
13. Adjust the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure is on the label located on the driver’s door.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING THE BATTERY
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow this procedure carefully.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump starting.
179
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place automatic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to OFF for
both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end to
the positive jump start attachment of the discharged
battery.
6
180
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and person
injury could result.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting to jump start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the jump start attachment of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make
sure you have a good contact on the engine.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
181
WARNING!
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area
immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
volts.
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
6
182
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels, particularly with high output engines.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
NOTE: If so equipped, turn on the Traction Control
System to accelerate on slippery surfaces.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control, turn
the system off before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h).
183
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Flat bed towing is the preferred towing method. If a flat
bed towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing
vehicle may be used.
Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels
on the ground, as transaxle damage can result. If rear
towing is the only alternative, a front end dolly must be
used.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type towing equipment. Damage to
the fascia and air dam may result.
6
184
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Automatic Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be towed must not exceed 15 miles (25 km),
and the towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40
km/h). If the transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle
is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km), the vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels off the ground.
Manual Transaxle
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed at any legal highway speed, for any
distance, if the transaxle is in neutral.
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position, not in
the LOCK or ACCESSORY positions.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
m 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 189
▫ Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 209
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Fuel System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7
186
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
m Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
m Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
m Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Headlight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Park, Turn Signal, Sidemarker Bulb
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Fog Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Center Stoplight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Rear Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ License Plate Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
m Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
m Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
187
2.4L ENGINE
7
188
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2.7L ENGINE
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
189
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
7
190
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
191
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
192
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained, at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting
the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
193
• Stop and Go driving
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C)
• Trailer towing
• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
• Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C)
• Off— road or desert operation
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule 9A9 of the 9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual.
7
194
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions,we recommend engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler’s Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). We
only recommend API Certified engine oils that meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler’s Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar
or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart
The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be
selected based on the following recommendation and be
within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil
viscosity chart.
Flexible Fuel Engine Oil
If you operate the vehicle on E-85 fuel either full or
part-time, use only Mopar Flexible Fuel 5W-30 engine oil
or an equivalent that meets the manufacturers Standard
MS-9214. Equivalent commercial Flexible Fuel engine oils
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
may be labeled as Flexible Fuel (FFV) or Alternate Fuel
(AFV). These engine oils may be satisfactory if they meet
the manufacturer’s standard.
CAUTION!
If Flexible Fuel engine oil is not used when using
E-85, engine wear may be increased significantly.
This may void your warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a growing number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you choose
to use such a product, use only those oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity
standard. Follow the service schedule that describes your
driving type.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
195
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
7
196
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is required, adjust the belts according to the specifications
and procedures shown in the Service Manual.
Special tools are required to properly measure tension
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference
between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Check the specifications section for the proper type
of spark plug for use in your vehicle.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly serviced to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
197
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, to the manufacturer’s specifications, should be
obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
7
198
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for prolonged period.
Engine Timing Belt
Replace the engine timing belt (2.4L Only) at the intervals
described in the appropriate maintenance schedule.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump starting.
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the Positive Crankshaft Ventilation
(PCV) valve and passages may accumulate deposits. If a
valve is not working properly, replace it with a new
valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV
VALVE!
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
199
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling. Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery
fluid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Battery gas is
flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks
away from the battery. Don’t use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output greater than
12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening. If a “fast charger” is used
while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger
to battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage as battery damage can result.
Air Conditioner
Check the air conditioning system at the start of the
warm weather season.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with
a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and
7
200
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
through the condenser as required. Fabric front fascia
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing
air conditioning performance.
WARNING!
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere. The manufacturer recommends
that air conditioning service be done by facilities using
refrigerant recycling and recovery equipment that meets
SAE standard J1991.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
“DaimlerChrysler Dealership”.
Before removing the reservoir cap, wipe the outside of
the cap and reservoir so that no dirt can fall into the
reservoir.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with
the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts,
and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended
fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
201
Body Mechanism Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors,liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Fluid level should be maintained at the proper level
indicated on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add
fluid to restore the proper indicated level. With a clean
cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for
correct fluid type.
Suspension Ball Joints
There are two upper front and rear suspension ball joints.
Inspect these ball joints whenever under vehicle service is
done. If the seals are damaged, the ball joint should be
replaced.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Hood Latch
When performing other under hood services, the hood
latch release mechanism and safety catch should be
inspected, cleaned, and lubricated.
It is important to maintain proper lubrication to insure
that the hood mechanisms work properly and safely.
7
202
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, NLGI Grade 2, should be applied sparingly to all pivot and sliding contact areas.
External Lock Cylinders
Lubricate the external lock cylinders twice a year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small amount of
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder (avoid excess lubricant).
Insert the key into the lock cylinder and rotate from the
unlocked to the locked position; without adding more
lubricant. Repeat this procedure three or four times. Wipe
all the lubricant off the key with a clean cloth, to avoid
soiling clothing.
If you use a lubricant that cannot be dispensed directly
into the lock cylinder, apply a small amount of the
lubricant to the key. Insert the key into the lock cylinder,
then proceed as described above, to distribute the lubricant within the lock cylinder. Pay attention to trunk
hinges, especially during cold weather, to ensure ease of
trunk operation.
Other Body Mechanisms
The following body mechanisms should be inspected
and, if necessary, all pivot and sliding contact areas of
these components should be lubricated with the lubricant
specified as follows:
Engine Oil
• Door hinges
• Hood hinges
• Trunk hinges
Smooth White Body Lubricant - Such as Mopar
Spray White Lube:
• Hood hinge springs and links
• Lock cylinders
• Parking brake mechanism
• Trunk latches
• Ash tray
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
• Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
• Push the release tab and slide the wiper blade assembly away from the wiper arm. Gently place the wiper
arm on the windshield.
• Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
203
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator antifreeze) rated not to freeze at -25°F (-31°C). Operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
7
204
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
205
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.
Cooling System
Inspection
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition key
to the OFF position. The fan is controlled by both
the temperature of the engine cooling system and
the pressure in the air conditioning system and
can start at any time the ignition key is in the ON
position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or cap is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check coolant protection every 12 months (before the
onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is
Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. Clean the radiator by gently spraying
water from a garden hose at the back of the core.
Check the recovery bottle tank tubing for condition and
tightness of connections at the bottle. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
7
(2.7L Engine Shown)
Do not remove the cap when the cooling system is hot.
206
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled. The
first change should not be required until 5 years or
100,000 miles (160,000 km), whichever comes first. The
coolant should be flushed and changed every two years
or 36,000 miles (57,600 km) thereafter.
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable
amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable
cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to
remove all deposits and chemicals. Used automotive
antifreeze is a recyclable commodity. Discard or recycle
as facilities exist in your area.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct coolant type.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the proper antifreeze could cause
radiator plugging and engine overheating. Do not
mix antifreeze brands or use plain water alone or
alcohol base antifreeze products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator coolant and
may plug the radiator or heater core.
Adding Coolant
When adding coolant, a solution of 50% ethylene glycol
antifreeze coolant in distilled water should be used. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 60%) if temperatures
below -32°F (-35°C) are anticipated.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant reserve tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add coolant when the engine is overheated.
Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do
not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot
or under pressure.
207
CAUTION!
Be sure to use only the cooling system pressure cap
specified for your vehicle. Use of any other pressure
cap may result in decreased engine cooling system
performance and/or damage to your vehicle.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. Do not store ethylene glycol based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals or
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the coolant level should be between
the “MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of the coolant
bottle. Some darkening of the coolant bottle will occur
7
208
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
over time. This is normal. If the coolant level is hard to
see, jostling the coolant bottle will make it easier to see.
There is no need to remove the radiator cap unless
checking for coolant freeze point, adding, or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. Heater
performance may also be adversely affected by low
coolant levels.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill. Special procedures are required when filling
the engine cooling system of the 2.7L Engine. See your
authorized dealer for details.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of
operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot water to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the system.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the bottle does not drop when the engine cools,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration of 50% ethylene glycol
(minimum) with recommended antifreeze for proper
corrosion protection of your engine that contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle hoses
are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle has
air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean,
also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions,
and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps
and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks
are present. Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could
cause failure.
209
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in section 8.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You may not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake and Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular
attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
7
210
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp shows system failure.
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before hose is replaced based
on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done
whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine
oil change.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, fill brake fluid reservoir to
the top of the fill mark chevron. With disc brakes, fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid or that is
unidentified as to DOT FMVSS specification may
result in sudden brake failure during hard or prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
211
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid as seal damage will result!
Fuel System Hoses
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with hoses and clamps which have unique
material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and
resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only manufacturer specified hoses
and clamps, or their equivalent in material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to
replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed
during service. Care should be taken in installing new
clamps to insure they are properly torqued.
Automatic Transmission
Your front wheel drive vehicle has a transmission and
differential assembly contained within a single housing.
This is referred to as a “Transaxle.”
7
212
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that
the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed
level using the recommended fluid.
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and of the fluid.
CAUTION!
• The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
following procedure must be used:
• The vehicle must be on level ground.
• Fully apply parking brake.
• Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK).
• Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
• If the fluid is cold (80°F / 27°C), the reading should be
in the cross hatched area marked “COLD” (between
the lower two holes in the dipstick).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
213
• If the fluid is hot (180°F / 82°C), the reading should be
in the cross hatched area marked ”HOT” (between the
upper two holes in the dipstick).
Maintenance schedule “B” — Every 60,000 miles (96 000
km) change fluid and filter under the following conditions:
• If the fluid level shows low, add sufficient transmission fluid to bring to the proper level.
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for maintenance schedules.
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
seated properly.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Maintenance schedule “A” — No change necessary.
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid
and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of
any fluid additives to the transaxle. The only exception to
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be
avoided as they may adversely affect seals.
7
214
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 4.0 mm below the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
lubricant has become contaminated with water. If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
215
Washing
Special Care
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and rear deck lid be kept
clear and open.
• Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains
and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
216
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Aluminum wheels should be cleaned regularly with
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, select a non abrasive, non acidic cleaner. Do
not use scouring pads or metal polishes. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
• Your painted and chrome aluminum wheels should be
treated as you would treat the finish on your car.
Always use a soft non-abrasive cloth with a mild dish
washing soap and water when cleaning your wheels.
Never use scouring pads, steel wool or a bristle brush.
Never use cleaners that contain acid, oven cleaners or
any abrasive metal cleaner as they will cause permanent staining and/or corrosion.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
deicer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl or leather upholstery.
Mopar Vinyl Cleaner is specifically recommended for
vinyl trim.
Use mild (Ivory Flake) solution to clean all surfaces. Wipe
with clear water and soft (lint free) cloth.
Do not use cleaners, conditioners and protectants containing silicon or bleach as these may cause gloss level
increases and/or discoloration.
You should not increase the gloss level, especially on top
of the instrument panel top surface. Higher gloss levels
will increase the reflectivity in the windshield that could
decrease visibility under bright light driving conditions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
217
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking the leather
with any liquid.
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
CAUTION!
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Never use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean the
leather. The leather has already been pretreated. The
application of any leather conditioner may damage
the factory applied top coat.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
7
218
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
• Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
• Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
219
A Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment; near the air cleaner. This information applies
to vehicles built without the fuse and relay numbering
embossed on the Power Distribution Center Top Cover.
Interior Fuses
7
The fuse access panel is behind the end cover at the left
side of the instrument panel. To remove the panel, pull it
out, as shown.
The identity of each fuse is indicated on the backside of
the cover.
220
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Fuse
Circuit
1
30 Amp Green Blower Motor
2
10 Amp Red
Right High Beam Headlight,
High Beam Indicator
3
10 Amp Red
Left High Beam Headlight
4
15 Amp Blue Power Door Lock Switch Illumination, Transmission
Range Switch, Daytime Running Light Module (Canada),
Power Windows, Anti-lock
Brake System Module
5
10 Amp Red
Power Door Lock and Door
Lock Arm/Disarm Switches,
Vanity, Reading, Map, Rear
Seating, Ignition, and Trunk
Lights, Illuminated Entry,
Radio, Power Antenna, Data
Link Connector, Body Control Module, Power Amplifier
6
10 Amp Red
Heated Rear Window Indicator
7
20 Amp YelInstrument cluster illuminalow
tion, Park and tail Lights
8
20 Amp YelPower Receptacle, Horns,
low
Ignition, Fuel, Start
Cavity Fuse
9
15 Amp Blue
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp
20 Amp
low
10 Amp
10 Amp
Red
YelRed
Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp
20 Amp
C/BRKR
30 Amp
C/BRKR
Circuit
Power Door Lock Motors
(Body Control Module)
Daytime Running Light Module (Canada)
Instrument Cluster, Transmission Control, Park/Neutral
Switch, Body Control Module
Left Low beam Headlight
Right Low Beam Headlight,
Fog Light Switch
Radio
Turn Signal and Hazard
Flashers, Wiper Switch, Seat
Belt Control Module, Wiper
Relays, Rear Window Defroster Relay
Airbag Control Module
Airbag Control Module
Power Seat Switch, Remote
Trunk Release
Power Windows
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it shows a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
221
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007
Park/Turn Signal (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Side / Marker (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880L
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Back Up Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Center Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
License Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2825
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 194
ABS Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 161
Fog Light Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 161
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Reading/Map Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Trunk Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Climate Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC161
7
222
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight Bulb Replacement
1. Open the hood and remove the two headlight mounting screws.
2. Remove the push-in fasteners by prying under the
head of the fasteners with a flat bladed tool.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
223
3. Gently pry the headlight assembly away from the
fender as shown in the picture. This will free the ball stud
from its retainer in the fender. Pull the headlight assembly away from the vehicle.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
4. Turn the retaining ring counterclockwise and remove
the bulb and socket assembly.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
6. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
224
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and turn the
retaining ring clockwise to secure the bulb.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove the
bulb and socket assembly.
8. Reinstall the headlight assembly.
Park, Turn Signal, Sidemarker Bulb Replacement
1. Open the hood and remove the two headlight assembly mounting screws. Pull the headlight assembly away
from the vehicle.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket, replace the bulb, and
reinstall the bulb and socket to the headlight assembly.
Reinstall the headlight assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Light Bulb Replacement
1. Remove the screws securing the light assembly to the
front fascia.
225
4. Turn the bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise
to remove it from the housing.
7
2. Pull the light assembly away from the vehicle to
expose the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb and
socket assembly.
5. Install the new bulb and socket assembly, reattach the
wiring connector, and reinstall the fog light assembly.
226
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Stoplight Bulb Replacement
1. Open the trunk. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
to remove it from the housing.
2. Disconnect the wiring connector and remove the plastic retainers. Remove the light housing from the vehicle.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket, replace the bulb and
reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
Rear Light Bulb Replacement
1. Open the trunk and pull the trunk liner away to
expose the wiring connector and light housing plastic
retainers.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the housing. Remove and replace the bulb then
reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
4. Reinstall the light housing and reconnect the wiring
connector. Push the trunk liner back into place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Plate Bulb Replacement
1. Locate both small slots on the outboard side of the
license lamp. Using a small screwdriver, remove the
entire housing.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the housing. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace
the bulb and snap it back into place on the housing of the
chrome appliqué.
Headlight Aiming
The headlights on your new vehicle were aimed at the
factory. The factory setting was made at a no load setting.
A great increase in weight will change the aiming and it
may be necessary to readjust the headlights if carrying an
excessive amount of weight in the trunk, rear seats or
pulling a trailer. To readjust the headlights first mark the
position of the headlights on a wall prior to loading the
vehicle. Load the vehicle and then readjust the headlights
to the original position. If any further adjustments are
necessary contact your manufacturer’s dealer. A detailed
service procedure is contained in the manufacturer’s
Service Manual. Information on purchasing a Service
Manual can be found at the back of this Owner’s Manual.
227
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
2.4 Liter Engine (87 Octane)
16 Gallons
61 Liters
2.7 Liter Engine (87 Octane)
16 Gallons
61 Liters
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil-with filter
2.4 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-30)
5 qts.
2.7 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-30)
5 qts.
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter Engines* (Mopart
8 qts.
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula)
2.7 Liter Engines (Mopart
9.5 qts.
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes 1 qt. for coolant tank.
4.7 Liters
4.7 Liters
7.5 Liters
9.0 Liters
7
228
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Spark Plugs
Oil Filter (2.4L Engine)
Oil Filter (2.7L Engine)
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology)
Use API Certified GF-3 engine oil. SAE 5W-30 is recommended. Refer to the
engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label under the engine
hood.
Mopart Oil Filter (P/N 4105409) or equivalent.
Mopart Oil Filter (P/N 5281090) or equivalent.
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
229
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Steering Gear & Linkage, Ball
Joints, Prop Shafts & Yokes, Wheel
Bearings
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopart Brake Fluid DOT 3 Motor Vehicle.
Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopart Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 232
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
m Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle (PZEV)
For 2.4L — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 C
m Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
232
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle (PZEV) for 2.4L —
If Equipped
NOTE: If the 8th digit of the vehicle identification
number (VIN) contains a 9J9 then your vehicle is
equipped with the Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle (PZEV)
package in order to meet the state of California’s PZEV
emissions standard.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE: There are specific instructions regarding when
to change the ignition cables and spark plugs with the
PZEV package in this section. This applies to both
maintenance schedule A and B and will be marked with
an ** or ***.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
233 M
A
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high I
N
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
T
E
N
A
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- N
C
vice).L
E
• Trailer towing.L
• Off-road or desert operation.
S
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) C
H
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the
“Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule 9B9.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule 9B9.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
234
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
At Each Stop for Fuel
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6 months or 6,000 miles, whichever
comes first.
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
CAUTION!
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transaxle and add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect the brake linings, hoses and calipers.
235 M
A
• Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension I
N
components.
T
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
• Check the brake master cylinder fluid level.
• Check the manual transmission fluid level.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Rotate the tires at each oil change interval shown on
Schedule “A” 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or every other
interval shown on Schedule “B” 6,000 miles (10 000
km).
NOTE: In 2.7L Engines equipped with Flex Fuel Engine
(FFV), change engine oil every 5 months or 5,000 miles,
whichever comes first. This applies to both Maintenance
Schedule A and B.
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
236
SCHEDULE “B”
SCHEDULE “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions. Change
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000
miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under
one or more of the conditions marked with an L.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
• Trailer towing.L
• Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial services).L
• Off-road or desert operation.
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual.
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
necessary.*
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
3,000
(5 000)
X
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
X
9,000
(14 000)
X
X
12,000
(19 000)
X
X
X
15,000
(24 000)
X
X
237 M
18,000
(29 000)
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 238 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reN
C quired.*
E Replace the air cleaner filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect and check tension for power steering
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if required.
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. **
21,000
(34 000)
X
X
24,000
(38 000)
X
X
27,000
(43 000)
X
X
30,000
(48 000)
X
33,000
(53 000)
X
X
36,000
(58 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
necessary.*
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
39,000
(62 000)
X
X
42,000
(67 000)
X
X
45,000
(72 000)
X
X
48,000
(77 000)
X
X
X
51,000
(82 000)
X
X
239 M
54,000
(86 000)
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 240 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
N
C necessary.*
E Replace the air cleaner filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect and check tension for power steering
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if required.
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engine.
**
Replace the accessory drive belts on the 2.7
liter engine.
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter engine. **
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *‡
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.L
57,000
(91 000)
X
X
60,000
(96 000)
X
63,000
66,000
69,000
(101 000) (106 000) (110 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
72,000
(115 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
necessary.*
Replace the air cleaner filter. *
Inspect and check tension for power steering
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if required.
Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter
engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. **
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve.
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
(120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
241 M
90,000
(144 000)
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
X
8
X
M 242 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
N
C necessary.*
E Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter enS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
gine. ***
Replace the ignition cables on the 2.4 liter engine. ***
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.7 liter engine.
Check and retension accessory drive belts on
2.7 liter engine.
Replace the accessory drive belts on 2.4 liter
engine.
93,000
96,000
99,000
100,000
102,000
(149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
105,000
(168 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
necessary.*
Replace the air cleaner filter. *
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter engine. **
Replace the ignition cables on the 2.4 liter engine. **
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Replace the accessory drive belts on 2.7 liter
engine.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.L
108,000
111,000
114,000
117,000
120,000
(174 000) (179 000) (183 000) (188 000) (193 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
243 M
123,000
(198 000)
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 244 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
N
C necessary.*
E Inspect and check tension for power steering
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if required.
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
126,000
129,000
132,000
135,000
138,000
(203 000) (208 000) (212 000) (217 000) (222 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
141,000
(227 000)
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if necessary.*
Replace the air cleaner filter. *
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter engine. **
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, rotors, rear drums
and shoes.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
** Except for the 2.4 liter Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
(PZEV).
*** 2.4 liter PZEV only.
144,000
(232 000)
X
X
147,000
(237 000)
X
X
150,000
(241 000)
X
X
X
245 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
S
C
H
X
E
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced. D
U
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime L
E
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re- S
ceipts.
8
M 246 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I SCHEDULE “A”
N
T Miles
E
N (Kilometers)
A [Months]
N
C Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
E Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary.*
Replace the air cleaner filter. *
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. **
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if required.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(19 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(29 000)
[18]
X
X
24,000
(38 000)
[24]
X
X
30,000
(48 000)
[30]
X
36,000
(58 000)
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter. *
Inspect and check tension for power steering
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if required.
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. **
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
or 102,000 miles.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *‡
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engine. **
Replace the accessory drive belts in 2.7 liter
engine.
42,000
(67 000)
[42]
X
X
48,000
(77 000)
[48]
X
X
54,000
(86 000)
[54]
X
X
60,000
(96 000)
[60]
X
66,000
72,000
(106 000) (115 000)
[66]
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
247 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 248 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter. *
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. **
Replace the spark plugs on 2.7 liter engine.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡
Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter engine.*
Check and retension alternator drive belts on 2.7
liter engine.
Replace the accessory drive belts on 2.4L engine.
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engine. ***
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. ***
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000 105,000
(125 000) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) (163 000) (168 000)
[78]
[84]
[90]
[96]
[102]
[105]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
108,000
(Kilometers)
(174 000)
[Months]
[108]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
X
required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter. *
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,
X
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. **
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *‡
Replace the accessory drive belts in 2.7 liter
engine.
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engine. **
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. **
114,000
(183 000)
[114]
X
X
249 M
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
(193 000) (203 000) (212 000) (222 000)
[120]
[126]
[132]
[138]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 250 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
E Replace the air cleaner filter. *
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
144,000
(232 000)
[144]
X
X
X
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. **
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
** Except for the 2.4 liter Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
(PZEV).
*** 2.4 liter PZEV only.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
150,000
(241 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
m Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
9
252
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to
provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or
related matter that you may experience. The manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to assure
your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
The manufacturer has empowered its dealers to make
warranty and repair decisions that ensure you are not
inconvenienced. There is no need for you to wait for a
decision from the manufacturer. If a special circumstance
occurs that requires information from the manufacturer,
we have asked the dealer’s service management to make
the contact on your behalf.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
253
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
254
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
warranty.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
255
9
256
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
257
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
(Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
9
258
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
WARNING!
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
The traction grade is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering
(turning) performance.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
259
WARNING!
The temperature grade is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
262
INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 206
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Aiming Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Air Cleaner, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,199
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,36
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,39,48,86
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Airbag, Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,37
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antifreeze Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Anti-Theft Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,211
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,136
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,199
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
INDEX
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Keyless Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 21
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,198
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Belts, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,209
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . 135,137
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . 47
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carpeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
227
227
215
216
263
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 119
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,105,107
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,108,113,115
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,110,112,119
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Central Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,41,43,44
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Cleaning
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10
264
INDEX
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Compact Disc Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,101
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Rubber and Plastic Components . . . . . . . . . . 209
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . 198
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . 62
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,124
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Disposal
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Door Ajar Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
INDEX
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,24
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . 190,232
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,188
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,188
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,227
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle for 2.4 Liter . . 232
Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,227
265
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Exterior Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
10
266
INDEX
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,225
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fuel
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,211
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
14
12
INDEX
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,85
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
12
12
19
11
32
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
267
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 43
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,48,86
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,139
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222
Check Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,65
Exterior Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,88,225
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10
268
INDEX
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,227
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,87,224
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Loading Vehicle
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,165
Locks
Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Luggage/Cargo Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Light Duty Schedule 9B9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Schedule 9A9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Schedule 9B9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,190
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,56
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,256
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
INDEX
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tampering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,227
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,194
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,194
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,190
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
269
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle for 2.4 Liter . . . . 232
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . 148
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 71,75
Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,71,75
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,105,110
10
270
INDEX
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,110,118
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 29
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,40,44
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
INDEX
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Side Window Demisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,86
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,200
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . 32
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
271
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 88,173
Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . 148
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,151,258
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
10
272
INDEX
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,151
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,184
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,86,143
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Transmission
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Transaxle
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,24
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,87
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,165
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Vinyl Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,227
INDEX
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Warning, Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,203
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
273
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,77
Window Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,37
Windows
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,203
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,203
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
10
Download PDF

advertising